Brother J825DW Printer User Manual

2004 Chevrolet S10 Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-27
Air Bag System
....................................... 1-47
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-54
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-6
Windows ................................................. 2-11
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-13
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-16
Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-33
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-42
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-22
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-36
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-42
M
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under
the Hood
............................................. 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-49
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-50
Front Axle
............................................... 5-51
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-59
Tires
...................................................... 5-61
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-94
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-103
Electrical System
.................................... 5-104
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-111
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name
S10 are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2408 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/12/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
Model Reference
This manual covers this model:
Crew Cab®
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-21
Center Passenger Position .............................1-21
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-23
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26
Child Restraints .............................................1-27
Older Children ..............................................1-27
Infants and Young Children ............................1-30
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33
Where to Put the Restraint
(Crew Cab) ..............................................1-36
Top Strap ....................................................1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-38
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System) ......................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Rear) .....................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position ............................................1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-44
Air Bag System ..............................................1-47
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-48
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-50
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-50
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-50
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-51
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-52
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle ................................1-53
Restraint System Check ..................................1-54
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-54
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-54
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
This section tells you about the seats – how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat
up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Power Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on
the outboard side of the front seat(s).
Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback
forward or rearward by moving the control toward
the front or rear of the vehicle.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-4 for more
information.
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, there will be a
control located on the
outboard side of the front
seat(s).
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat
by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control. Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or
the rear of the vehicle.
Press and hold the front of the control until you have
the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the rear of the control.
Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
1-3
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will heat the lower cushion and lower back
of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on
low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the
heater on high. Put the switch in the center position to
turn the heater off.
The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
1-4
To adjust a manual
seatback, lift the lever on
the outboard side of
the seat.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want
it. To return the seat to an upright position, pull up
on the lever without pushing on the seatback.
If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat
control described in Power Seats on page 1-3,
pressing it rearward allows the seatback to recline.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
1-6
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seatback can be tilted forward to let you reach
the area behind it.
The rear seatback can be
tilted forward to let you
reach the area behind it.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
To tilt the seatback forward, lift up on the lever located
at the base of the seatback on the driver’s or
passenger’s side and then push the seatback forward.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push
the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, try to pull the seatback
forward to make sure it is locked.
1-7
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-8
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on
page 3-25.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-30. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-14
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-16
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
1-18
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Center Passenger Position
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
1-21
Lap Belt
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-22
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-23
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-24
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-25
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-26
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in a rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have a choice, a child should sit next to a window
so that the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get
the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-27
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,
but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
1-28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-29
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION:
1-30
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults and
older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in
which it will be used.
1-31
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
1-32
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-33
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-34
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-35
Where to Put the Restraint
(Crew Cab)
CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat outside position, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger’s seat.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
CAUTION:
1-36
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
There is a limited space in the rear seating area of a
crew cab pickup model. If you want to secure a
child restraint in a rear outside seating position of a
crew cab model, be sure to study the instructions that
came with your child restraint to see if there is enough
room to secure your seat properly. Do not secure a
child restraint in the center rear seating position,
because the restraints will not work properly.
If a forward-facing child seat must be secured in the
vehicle’s right front seat, the seat should be moved back
as far as possible. However, it is better to secure the
restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child
restraint can move around in a collision or sudden
stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle – even when
no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
When using a top strap-equipped child restraint in a
rear outboard seating position, route the top strap over
the top of the seatback. Then, attach it to the anchor
point for that seating position.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
The anchor points for the rear seat child restraint
positions are located on the back wall behind the
rear seat.
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position because there is no place
to anchor the top strap.
1-38
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH System. It is
available in the second row outboard seating positions
and in the front passenger position.
1-39
{CAUTION:
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the anchors for this child
restraint system, place your hand in a palm-up position
and reach up between the seat cushion and the
seatback.
1-40
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System”, “Securing a
Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position” or “Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for
information on how to secure a child restraint
in your vehicle.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Rear)
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom
of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-37.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-41
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-42
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Do not use a child restraint in this position. The restraint
will not work properly.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat. Here is why:
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint
in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2 or
Power Seats on page 1-3.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-44
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-45
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-46
Air Bag System
CAUTION:
(Continued)
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags – one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover,
rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt — even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air
bags are designed to deploy only in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
1-47
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-26.
{CAUTION:
Where Are the Air Bags?
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-27 and Infants
and Young Children on page 1-30.
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
1-48
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-49
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
'threshold level'. If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If
your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform,
such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag,
and related hardware are all part of the air bag
modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-14 for more tips on off-road driving.
1-50
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag — will be hot for a
short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air
baginflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include air
bag modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
which records information about the air bag
system. The module records information about the
readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.
1-51
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
1-52
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s
basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep
the air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system
from working properly. Also, the air bag system
may not work properly if you relocate any of the air
bag sensors. If you have any questions about
this, you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
1-53
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-54
If you ever see a label on
the driver’s or the right
front passenger’s safety
belt that says to replace
the belt, be sure to do so.
Then the new belt will
be there to help protect
you in a collision. You
would see this label on the
belt near the door
opening.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
systems parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
1-55
✍ NOTES
1-56
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6
Door Locks ....................................................2-6
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-9
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................2-9
Tailgate .......................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-11
Manual Windows ..........................................2-12
Power Windows ............................................2-12
Sliding Rear Window .....................................2-13
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14
Passlock® ....................................................2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-20
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-22
Parking Brake ..............................................2-25
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-26
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-28
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-31
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-31
Outside Manual Mirror ...................................2-31
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-32
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-33
Storage Areas ................................................2-33
Glove Box ...................................................2-33
Overhead Console ........................................2-33
Front Storage Area .......................................2-40
Assist Handles .............................................2-40
Garment Hooks ............................................2-40
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-40
Bed Rails ....................................................2-41
Sunroof .........................................................2-42
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks. It
will fit with either side up.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to
have new ones made easily using this number.
Your dealer should also have this number.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
UNLOCK: Press UNLOCK
to unlock the driver’s door.
The parking lamps will
flash and the interior lights
will go on.
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
2-4
If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds, the
remaining doors will unlock.
LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
L(Panic Alarm): Press this button to make the horn
sound and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up
to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
the panic button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or
starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter
do the following:
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert an object like a thin coin in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing near the key
ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-7 for instructions.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-5
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:
• You can use the keyless entry system, if your
vehicle has this feature.
• You can use your key to unlock your door from the
outside.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-6
• You can use the power lock switch (if equipped) to
lock or unlock the doors.
To manually lock or unlock
a door from the inside,
slide the manual lever on
your door.
You will see a colored area on the lever when the
door is unlocked.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
If your vehicle has power door locks, they are
programmable.
Your vehicle will be programmed to have all the doors
lock automatically when the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P). All the doors will unlock when the
shift lever is moved back into PARK (P).
The following is a list of the available programming
options and how to set them after entering the
program mode:
If your vehicle has power door locks, the switch is
located on the armrest. Remove the ignition key and
press LOCK to lock all the doors at once.
To unlock the doors, press the raised area next to the
key symbol.
All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks: Press
the lock side of the power door lock switch once and
then the unlock side once. If your vehicle is not equipped
with remote keyless entry, you may not be able to
utilize this option.
All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock side
of the power door lock switch once, and then the
unlock side twice.
2-7
All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power door lock switch once, and
then the unlock side three times.
No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power door lock switch twice. This
turns off the automatic lock feature. This is the factory
setting.
For more information, see your dealer.
The following instructions detail how to program your
door locks. Choose one of the programming options
before entering the programming mode.
2-8
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition in OFF. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever all the way toward you
and hold it while you perform the next step.
2. Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice. Then, with
the key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock
switch lock and unlock.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the previous four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have
30 seconds to begin programming. If you exceed
the 30 second limit, the locks will automatically lock
and unlock to indicate you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1. You can exit the program mode any
time by turning the ignition to RUN. The locks
will automatically lock and unlock to indicate you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks.
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so
they can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.
The security lock lever is
located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
If you want to open the rear door when the security lock
is on, unlock the door and open the door from the
outside. To return the rear doors to normal use,
disengage the locks by sliding the lever to the unlock
symbol.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
To use the security locks, do the following:
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Slide the lever up to the lock symbol to engage
the lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door.
2-9
Tailgate
You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches
securely.
Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate:
1. Raise the tailgate slightly.
2. Remove both retaining
cables. To remove
each cable, turn it so
the end faces the front.
Then, push forward
so the larger part of the
hole is over the bolt.
Pull the end over
the bolt.
3. With the tailgate halfway down, pull the tailgate
toward you at the left side and then move the
tailgate to the left to release the right side.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure it is secure.
2-10
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-11
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
manual side door windows.
Power Windows
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
the armrests on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)”
under Ignition Positions on page 2-16. The driver’s
door has a switch for the passengers windows as well.
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to
lower a window. Press the side of the switch with the up
arrow to raise the window.
Express Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature that
allows you to lower it without holding the window switch.
Press the down arrow on the switch marked AUTO
located on the driver’s door briefly to activate the
express-down feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the
window slightly. The express-down feature can be
interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow on the
switch.
Window Lockout
Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent
passengers from operating the power windows. It
is located on the driver’s door armrest. Press LOCK to
activate this feature. Press NORM and the windows
will return to normal operation.
The driver will still be able to activate all the windows
when LOCK is active.
2-12
Sliding Rear Window
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can pull the visor down. You
can also swing the visor from side-to-side.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the
center of the window and slide the glass to open it.
When you close the window, be sure the latch is
engaged.
2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content
Theft-Deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY light will flash
as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The
SECURITY light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for
110 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery
power.
2-14
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
Testing the Alarm
Passlock®
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will
go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release the
key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if
you turn the engine off. However, your
Passlock® system is not working properly and must be
serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected
by Passlock® at this time. You may also want to check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-105. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
2-15
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to five
different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or slow —
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-51 for more information.
2-16
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not
operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
A (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you. Your
steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before
you inserted the key.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
B (LOCK): This position locks your ignition, when the
key is removed. The steering wheel locks when
equipped with a manual tranmission. It’s a theft-deterrent
feature. You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
C (OFF): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must
have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for
example, if your vehicle is being towed).
D (RUN): This is the position for driving.
E (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of
your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof and overhead
console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN
to OFF, these features will continue to work for up to
20 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-17
Starting Your Engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or 18°C), do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position–
that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-18
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Speed Control
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine overspeed
control that shuts the fuel off when the engine reaches
5,600 rpm.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located in the engine compartment behind
the underhood fuse block on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110–volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-19
Automatic Transmission Operation
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF, but
not locked, there will be a small current drain on
your battery which could discharge your battery over a
period of time. If you need to leave your key in the
ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
2-20
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-26. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever–push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
on page 2-28.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-40.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting our of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Be sure the engine is not racing
when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
2-21
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills
or winding roads or for off-road driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on. You can
also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a
stop on slippery road surfaces.
2-22
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission won’t shift into FIRST (1)
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Four-Wheel Drive
Your vehicle has four-wheel drive. You can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. See
Off-Road Recovery on page 4-11.
You should use two-wheel high (2HI) for most normal
driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive
in four-wheel drive on pavement for extended
periods of time.
Transfer Case
The transfer case buttons
are to the right of the
steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
4LO (Four-Wheel Drive Low): You may never need
4LO. This setting also engages your front axle to
give you extra traction. It sends the maximum power to
all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were
driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and climbing
or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in
for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Use these buttons to shift into and out of
four-wheel-drive. You can choose among three driving
settings:
2HI (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your front axle
is not engaged in two-wheel drive. When this light
is turned on, it is about one-half as bright as the others.
Press and release the 4HI button. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.
4HI (Four-Wheel Drive High): This setting engages
your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when
you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy
roads, or in most off-road situations.
2-23
Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO
button. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI
button. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to
stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged.
If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle
is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged.
If your transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your
transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and
release the 4LO button. While the 4LO indicator light is
flashing, shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait
until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before
shifting your transmission into gear. This will get
you into 4LO, but you should take your vehicle in for
service to restore normal operation.
If your transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your
transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and
release the 4HI button. While the 4HI indicator light is
flashing, shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until
the 4HI indicator light remains illuminated before
shifting your transmission into gear. This will get you
into 4HI, but you should take your vehicle in for service
to restore normal operation.
2-24
Parking Brake
The parking brake is located near the bottom of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light will come on.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully. It is
located on the bottom off the instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-51. That section
shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-25
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-51.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
2-26
• Pull the lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
• Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-27
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park
(P) on page 2-26.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK when
the ignition is in the OFF position. In addition, you
have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-20.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application and
then move the shift lever into the gear you want. You
must press the shift lever button on the shift lever.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you
want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-28
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-29
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-36.
2-30
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-26.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-51.
Mirrors
Time Delay
Manual Rearview Mirror
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing
of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you after dark. Push
the tab away from you for normal daytime operation.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells and mirror face when necessary.
If your vehicle has this feature, the mirror automatically
changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind
you. A photocell on the back of the mirror senses when
it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell built
into the mirror surface senses when headlamps
are behind you.
Cleaning the Mirror
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare. This change may take
a few seconds. The mirror will return to its clear
daytime state when the vehicle is put into REVERSE (R)
or when the glare is reduced.
Outside Manual Mirror
AUTO (Automatic Dimming): This button is located at
the base of the mirror. Use it to turn on the automatic
feature. The button has an indicator light to show it is on.
You can also fold the mirrors in before entering a car
wash. Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push
the mirrors back out when finished.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the
side of your vehicle and the area beside and behind
your vehicle from a comfortable driving position.
OFF: Press this button to turn the automatic feature off.
2-31
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s door
armrest.
Outside Convex Mirror
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose
the driver’s or passenger’s mirror, then use the
arrows located on the four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go.
Put the selector switch back in the center position when
finished adjusting the mirror so that you don’t
accidentally bump into the control pad and get the
mirror out of adjustment.
2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated outside
rearview mirrors.
Glove Box
The heated mirror button is
located to the lower right
of the mode knob on
the climate control system.
The button has an
indicator light to indicate if
the heated mirror feature
is on or off.
When the heated mirror feature is turned on, the
defogger will warm the mirrors to help clear them of
snow or condensation. The heated mirror feature
will turn off automatically when the mirror is clear.
To open your glove box, lift the lever on the front of the
glove box and lower the door. The glove box should
not be open while you are driving.
Overhead Console
If your vehicle has this feature, the overhead console
includes reading lamps, a compartment for a garage
door opener, a temperature and compass display and a
storage compartment for sunglasses.
2-33
Reading Lamps
Installing a Garage Door Opener
Press the button near
each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
1. Open the compartment door by pressing the latch
forward.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the desired
direction.
Press it firmly to the back of your garage door
opener, as close to the center of the opener
as possible.
3. Center the garage door opener activation button
over the console door button and press the opener
firmly into place.
2-34
Now, with the compartment
door closed, press the
button again to make sure
the garage door operates
properly.
4. The pegs inside the compartment door are used to
make sure the button on the compartment door will
contact the control button on the garage door
opener.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only have
to press the button lightly to operate the opener.
5. Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when
you press the button.
2-35
Temperature and Compass Display
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, the word ICE will appear
on the display. This is a warning to the driver that road
conditions may be icy, and that appropriate precautions
should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to
be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new, the
compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
calibration, drive in a complete 360° circle three
times and the compass will function normally.
The outside air temperature and the compass are
displayed at the front of the overhead console. The
buttons are located to the left of the display.
ON/OFF: Press this button to turn the display on or off..
US/MET: Press this button for the temperature to be
displayed in either degrees Farenheit (English) or
Celsius (metric).
2-36
Variance is the different between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your
zone number.
2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET
buttons. The display will go off.
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL (Variance Calibration)
will appear on the display. When it does, release
both buttons.
The overhead console has a sunglasses storage
compartment.
2-37
Driver Information Center (DIC)
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC), this system displays the outside air
temperature, compass direction and trip information in
the overhead console.
US/MET (United States/Metric): The US/MET (United
States/metric) button allows you to switch the display
between the English and metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
between three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP
and TRIP.
COMP/TEMP (Compass/Temperature): The display
provides the outside temperature and one of eight
compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside
temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower, the display will
toggle between the ICE and the current temperature
every eight seconds. This is a warning to the drive that
road conditions may be icy, and that appropriate
precautions should be taken.
2-38
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to
be manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed,
the compass will need to be calibrated. You may also
place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing
the holding the MODE and US/MET buttons at the
same time while in the COMP/TEMP mode. After about
10 seconds, the compass will display C and you can
release the buttons. Drive the vehicle in a complete 360°
circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and the compass will function normally. Once
the calibration is complete, the display will return to
a compass reading.
Variance is the different between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
the variance for your particular location:
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press MODE to set your zone number. Your
variance is now set and the display will return to the
COMP/TEMP mode.
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, press the MODE button
for the following trip functions:
AVG ECON (Average Economy): The average fuel
economy since the last reset is displayed.
INST ECON (Instantaneous Economy): Instantaneous
fuel economy for the last second of driving is displayed.
RANGE: The display indicates the estimated distance
that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank,
based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of
driving.
1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your
zone number.
2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET
buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.
3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset is
displayed.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average speed
since the last reset is displayed.
To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two
seconds. All functions will be displayed briefly once the
system is reset. Reset can only be performed in the
AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes. All
three modes are reset at the same time.
2-39
Front Storage Area
If your vehicle has a console compartment, squeeze the
front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of
the compartment. It is located on the floor in the front
of your vehicle.
Assist Handles
Use the assist handle above each passenger door
when getting out of your vehicle.
Garment Hooks
Your vehicle is equipped with garment hooks. They are
located on the headliner in front of the assist handles.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with a luggage carrier, it may
have side rails and crossrails attached to the roof to
secure cargo. The adjustable tie downs, at both ends of
the crossrails, should be used to secure loads to the
luggage carrier. Use GM accessory racks that are
compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting
sports equipment. These are available through
your dealer.
2-40
You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various
sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of
the crossrail and move them to where you want them.
Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even,
then tighten the slider knobs.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow these
guidelines:
• Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not
recommended.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-42.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Bed Rails
• Secure the load using the tie downs at both ends of
the crossrails. When loading cargo directly on the
roof panel, use the crossrails to keep the load from
shifting.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie
downs provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers.
Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails
or side rails are damaged.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as
far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has bed rails, they are there for
appearance only. If you try to tie down a load
with them, or to secure things in your truck,
not only can it damage the bed rails, but the
load can loosen. This could cause injury to
you or others. Secure loads by using the cargo
tie-down loops, inside the truck bed area.
2-41
Sunroof
To operate the sunroof using the power switch do the
following:
If your vehicle has a
sunroof, the switch is
located between the
sun visors.
1. When vent opening the sunroof press and hold the
side of the switch with the roof symbol on it until the
roof is vented.
2. Press and hold the side of the switch with the roof
symbol on it again to fully open the roof. The roof
will stop when it is fully opened.
Releasing the switch at any time will stop the roof
at that position.
3. To close the sunroof press the side of the switch
opposite of the roof symbol and hold it until the
glass panel is seated.
The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition is on
or when the ignition is off and retained accessory
power is active. See “Retained Accessory Power” under
Ignition Positions on page 2-16 for more information.
2-42
Manually Closing the Sunroof
If you are unable to operate the sunroof using the
switch, check the fusible link under the dashboard.
Your vehicle, when new, came with a tool for manually
operating your sunroof. See your dealer if you cannot
locate this tool in your vehicle.
To manually close the sunroof do the following:
2. Insert the key and turn to the right.
1. Use a flat bladed tool to remove the cover.
2-43
✍ NOTES
2-44
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25
Tachometer .................................................3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-25
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-26
Charging System Light ..................................3-27
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-27
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-29
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-33
Security Light ...............................................3-34
Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light ..........3-34
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-35
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-35
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-36
Audio System(s) .............................................3-36
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-37
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-37
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-38
Radio with CD ..............................................3-41
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-51
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-61
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios) .....................................3-75
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios) ...........................................3-75
Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-76
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-76
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-77
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-78
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-78
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(48 Contiguous US States) .........................3-78
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21 for
more information.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-23 for more information.
C. Electronic Transfer Case Switch. See “Transfer
Case” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 5-50
for more information.
D. Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-12
for more information.
E. Fog Lamp Button. See “Fog Lamps” under Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12 for more information.
F. Brake Release. See Parking Brake on page 2-25 for
more information.
G. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6 for more
information.
H. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5 for more information.
I. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-18 for more information.
J. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-18 for more information.
K. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-17 for more information.
L. Heated Outside Rearview Mirror Button (If
Equipped). See Outside Heated Mirrors on
page 2-33 for more information.
M. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-36
for more information.
N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-33 for more
information.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the top of the steering
column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work. The flashers will stop if you step on
the brake.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on
the driver’s side of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. If you have the tilt steering wheel, you
can raise it to the highest level to allow more room
for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-6
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-105 and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you
and the high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return
to normal operation.
3-7
Windshield Wipers
To operate the windshield wipers turn the band, located
on the multifunction lever, upward or downward.
MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it until the windshield wipers start. Then let it
go. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If
you want more wipes, hold the band on MIST longer.
OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the windshield
wipers.
LO (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to LO
and past the delay settings for steady wiping at low
speed.
JPUSH (Windshield Washer):
There is a paddle
marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of
the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the
window and then either stop or return to your preset
speed.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
HI (High Speed): Turn the band away from you, to HI,
and past the delay settings for wiping steady at high
speed.
{CAUTION:
Delayed Wiping: You can set the wiper speed for a
long or short delay between wipes. Turn the band
to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter
the delay.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-8
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
• Cruise control can be dangerous where
•
you can not drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the end of
the turn signal/multifunction
lever.
3-9
OFF: Move the switch to this position to turn the cruise
control off.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
ON: Move the switch to this position to turn the cruise
control on.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So
unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
R/A (Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to this
position to maintain a desired speed after braking.
SET: Press this button at the end of the lever to set
your desired speed.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate).
3-10
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch briefly to
R/A. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-11
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
9 (Off): Turn the exterior lamps control all the way
counterclockwise to turn off the lamps and put the
system in automatic headlamp mode.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turning the exterior lamps
control to this position turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
O (Headlamps):
The control on the driver’s side of the instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
3-12
Turning the exterior lamps control to
this position turns on the headlamps, together with
the previously listed lamps and lights.
Automatic Headlamp System
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill.
Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness Control” under Interior Lamps
on page 3-15.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door
is opened and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY. To turn the chime off, turn the control
counterclockwise or turn the instrument panel brightness
thumbwheel down to the fully dimmed position. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition
key is in OFF.
3-13
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamp control is in OFF,
the sensor detects daytime light,
an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off
temporarily while the turn signals are activated.
3-14
To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the DRL
off, put the transmission in PARK (P). To idle a
manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off, set the
parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of
PARK (P) or release the parking brake.
The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) feature by following the steps below:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you that
the system is off. The system will revert back to the
automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to
OFF and then to RUN again.
3. To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME
OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds (a
chime will sound), or turn the ignition to OFF
and then to RUN again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Interior Lamps
Your vehicle may be equipped with fog lamps. Use your
fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions.
Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
It is located on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
next to the exterior lamps control.
Turn the thumbwheel up to make your instrument panel
lights brighter or down to dim them. Turn the
thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an entry lighting feature.
The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel
near the lamp control.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. A light will glow in
the button when the fog lamps are on.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high-beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
When either front door is opened, the dome lamps
will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the
out position. If your vehicle is equipped with remote
keyless entry and all the front doors are closed, or the
front door handles are lifted and released, the lamps will
stay on for a short period of time and will turn off
automatically. If you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior lights will
come on for a short time whether or not the DOME
OVERRIDE button is in the out position.
3-15
Exit Lighting
Dome Lamp
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition to help you
see while exiting the vehicle. These lights will stay on
for a short period of time and then will go out, if the
DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position.
The dome lamp will come on when you open either
front door.
Front Map Lamps
If your vehicle has front map lamps, they are located in
the overhead console. The front map lights that are
located on the inside rearview mirror will automatically
come on for approximately 40 seconds when the
doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned
to RUN or ACCESSORY. The lamps will also stay on
for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle,
unless you lock the doors with the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
switch near each lamp.
3-16
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
instrument panel brightness thumbwheel, located next to
the exterior lamps control, all the way up to the
second notch. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the exterior lamps control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when either front door is
opened, or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press
the button in. With the button in, the dome lamps
will remain off when either front door is opened. To
return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button
again and return it to the out position. With the button
in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you
open either front door. This will override the illuminated
entry feature, unless you use your remote keyless
entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock the vehicle.
Battery Rundown Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box, cargo and underhood lamps if they
are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition
is off. This will keep your battery from running down.
If the battery rundown protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return it to normal operation:
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
• turn the ignition key to RUN.
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may be equipped with an accessory power
outlet.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
There may be an accessory power outlet located near
the center of the vehicle on the lower part of the
instrument panel. A small cap must be pulled down to
access an accessory power outlet. When not using
an outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may be equipped with an ashtray and
cigarette lighter.
Climate Control System
Pull the front ashtray door down to open it.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray, pull the bin upward.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-18
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Operation
Mode Knob: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your
vehicle.
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets, with a little air directed toward the floor
vents.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is also
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the mode knob to OFF to turn off the fan.
The mode knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging”
later in this section.
Temperature Knob: Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the temperature
on the inside of your vehicle.
When it’s cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide warmer air
faster to your vehicle. An engine coolant heater warms
the coolant that the engine uses to provide heat to
warm the inside of your vehicle. For more information,
see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-19.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Turn the knob to the A/C
position to turn the air-conditioning system on or
off. When the system is on, this setting cools and
dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs it
through the floor outlets as well as the instrument
panel outlets.
3-19
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): This mode
recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle so
it cools quickly. It directs most of the air through the
instrument panel outlets and a small amount through the
floor outlets.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select A/C.
2. Select the coolest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-20
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield and side windows.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog
or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. For best results, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield before defrosting.
- (Defog): This mode can be used on cool, humid
days to keep the windshield and side windows clear.
1 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with only a
little air directed to the floor outlets. When you select this
mode, the system runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Outlet Adjustment
The flow through outlets on your vehicle allow outside
air to enter your vehicle while it is moving. Outside
air will also enter your vehicle while the air-conditioning
compressor is running.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Use the thumbwheels located in the center and on the
sides, to change the direction of the air flowing
through the outlets.
3-21
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate
them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-22
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly–and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
Base Level Cluster United States, Canada similar
3-23
Uplevel Cluster United States, Canada similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer (if equipped) displays the engine speed
in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for several
more.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button until
it resets.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
3-25
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag System on page 1-47.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-26
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in RUN), this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
3-27
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
3-28
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for more
information.
3-29
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light in
Canada
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK
ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a
problem and service is required.
3-30
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-31
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-32
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
3-33
Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
The light will stay on until
the engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-15.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for
additional information regarding the SECURITY light.
3-34
Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning
Light
If you have this light, it
should come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, as a check
to show you it is working.
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the four-wheel drive system
and service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent,
which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the
engine.
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
If this light comes and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
Fuel Gage
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
speed up.
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
3-35
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
when you start your
engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn if off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling Your
Tank on page 5-7.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-16.
3-36
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the time with
the ignition off, press RCL, HR, or MIN and the time will
appear on the display for a few seconds. There is an
initial two-second delay before the clock goes into
time-set mode.
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM or PM will appear on
the display for morning or evening hours. Press and
hold the minute button until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time may be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for
two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol
appears on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
3-37
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Time
display is available with the ignition turned off.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
3-38
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following
steps:
AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-39
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
Theftlock® system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab
model.
3-40
Radio with CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-41
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as
you drive, automatic volume automatically increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at
any speed. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. If you do ot want to use
automatic volume, select AVOL OFF.
3-42
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
the DISP knob while in XM mode to retrieve four
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, if
equipped). The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (48
contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r:
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q PSCAN r (Preset Scan):
Press and hold
either arrow for more than two seconds and the radio
will produce one beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. SCAN
will appear on the display. Press either arrow again
or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or
XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the equalization
that you selected will be automatically stored for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-43
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep with the level
display in the middle position. The bass and the treble
will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
appears on the display.
3-44
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and the
fade will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep with the level
display in the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE LIST to exit program type select
mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-45
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
symbol will disappear from the display until another
new message is received. The old message can
be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio
finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
3-46
will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will
hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on
the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-47
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-48
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the EJT
button or the DISP knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, if it was the
last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold this
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time of
the track.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time of
the track.
3-49
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
Z EJT (Eject):
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
If CHECK CD appears on the display and the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
DISP knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
3-50
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning the
CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Cassette and CD
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and selected display will now be the default.
3-51
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following
steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
1. Turn the radio on.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3. Tune in the desired station.
q PSCAN r (Preset Scan):
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
q SEEK r:
Press and hold
either arrow for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan through each
of the preset stations stored on the pushbuttons, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
SCAN will appear on the display. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
3-52
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep with the level
display in the middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
you hear one beep. The balance and the fade will be
adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep with the level
display in the middle position.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
is displayed.
3-53
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-54
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE LIST to exit program type select
mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape or
CD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
symbol will disappear from the display until another
new message is received. The old message can
be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio
finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
the radio will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a
traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAF
will appear on the display.
3-55
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette
tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-56
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound,
the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove
the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the EJT button or the DISP knob.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times or holding it will
increase the number of selections to be searched
back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work. Press
this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. If
you press this pushbutton more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
quickly within the tape. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape reverses.
The station frequency and REV will appear on
the display. You may select stations during reverse
operation using TUNE, SEEK, or PSCAN.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly within the tape. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
The station frequency and FWD will appear on
the display. You may select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE, SEEK, or PSCAN.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
q SEEK r: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or a negative number will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape or a CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape or a
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z EJT (Eject):
Press this button, located to the right
of the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may
be activated with the ignition or radio off. Cassette tapes
may be loaded with the radio off if this button is
pressed first.
3-57
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play because of one of
the following reasons:
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after disabling the
tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player.
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-76.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If you radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-58
To disable the feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio will
display READY and flash the cassette symbol.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until EJT is
pressed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the EJT
button or the DISP knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, if it was the
last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold this
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time of
the track.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time of
the track.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
3-59
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
DISP knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE CD): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio.
Z EJT (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-60
CD Messages
If CHECK CD appears on the display and the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-61
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
the RCL knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve four
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, if
equipped). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-62
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-63
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will
adjust the display level to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized bass, midrange, and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will
produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the
display.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
midrange, and treble using the AUDIO knob.
3-64
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected
PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-65
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on press
and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the
display. The radio may switch to stronger stations.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When
you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate
frequency feature will automatically be turned on.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3-66
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press the INFO
button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The old message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio
finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the
brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to
go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the
display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcements if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD
if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the dealer
for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
3-67
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-68
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-69
Playing a CD
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-70
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed.
If you select an equalization setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
The CD will begin to play automatically. As each new
track starts to play, the track number will appear on the
display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Press the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button
again. Once the light turns green, load the next
CD. Repeat this procedure for each CD.
The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to
load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
CDs, the radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will be displayed. If you select an equalization
setting for your CD, it will be activated each time you
play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will
appear under the CD number that is playing, and the
track number will appear.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a CD. You will hear a beep and the
light will flash to let you know when a CD is being
ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
CD will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the CD back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press
of eject, which will cause the receiver to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
3-71
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove
the CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off
and then on again, or wait for the system to reset.
This will clear the CD-sensing feature and enable CDs
to be loaded into the player again.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the passage.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the passage.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
3-72
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a CD. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
sSEEK t:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold an
arrow or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track and elapsed time), press the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
CD(s) is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Using Song List Mode
The six-CD CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed a
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will
sound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-73
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, a beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
3-74
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If
the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOC will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If
the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-75
Understanding Radio Reception
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
AM
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-76
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and a
cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape
detection feature will be active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-77
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-78
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (48 Contiguous US States)
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ system. Make
sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-11
Loss of Control .............................................4-13
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle ....................................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-26
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-27
City Driving ..................................................4-30
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-31
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-32
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-34
Winter Driving ..............................................4-36
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-40
Towing ..........................................................4-42
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-42
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-42
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-42
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-49
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-51
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................4-51
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-51
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age,
physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But
even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph
(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-29.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems —
steering and acceleration — have to do their work where
the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-11
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-12
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive.
Also, see Anti-Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4-6.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the
local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
4-14
Environmental Concerns
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42, Luggage
Carrier on page 2-40 and Tires on page 5-61.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-15
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-16
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-17
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can
not do. There are some hills that simply can not be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you may not see this because the crest
of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can not control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top.
4-18
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-19
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is
about to stall, and I can not make it up the
hill?
A:
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can
not make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can not do it. What should
I do?
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-20
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle
would take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep
to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You
could roll over if you do not drive straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal pressed
down in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-21
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) (or to neutral with the manual
transmission) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
4-22
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut,
etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
4-23
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You can not accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-24
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-27 for
more information on driving through water.
4-25
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-26
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-27
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-28
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-61.
4-29
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-31.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-30
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-31
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-32
all levels?
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
Then here are some tips:
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-14 for information about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-34
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
4-35
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-36
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
4-37
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-38
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-39
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-40
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-80.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need
to be pulled to some place where you can continue
driving.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-41
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
4-42
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicles
without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s door edge. This
label lists the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight is
called the vehicle capacity weight.
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-61
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the
tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
4-43
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-51 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
4-44
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
B
C
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-45
Refer to your vehicle’s tire loading information label for
specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the
size of your original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
4-46
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle–like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else–they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-14.
4-47
Payload
This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can
carry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupants
as part of your load. If you added any accessories
or equipment after your vehicle left the factory,
remember to subtract the weight of these things from
the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is
securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The
load’s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone
over the rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp
area must be properly marked according to local laws
and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the rear axle.
Two-Tiered Loading
Add-On Equipment
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across the
width of the pickup box, you can create an upper
load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup
box depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on
each end of the plank.
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
4-48
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The Truck-Camper Loading label is located on the
passenger’s door near the latch. It will tell you if your
vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a load
your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread
out your load. Also, it will help you match the right
slide-in camper to your vehicle.
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the
total cargo load of the truck consists of the
manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
installed additional camper equipment not included in
the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the
camper. The total cargo load should not exceed
the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center
of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended
center of gravity zone when installed.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But, you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seating
position. The total cargo load must not be more than
your vehicle’s CWR.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information Label
on the passenger’s door for dimensions A and B as
shown in the following illustration.
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement
purposes. The recommended location for the cargo
center of gravity for the Cargo Weight Rating (C) is the
point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if
suspended at that point, would balance the front and rear.
4-49
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match:
If your slide-in camper and its load weigh less than the
CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle
may be larger.
Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper
match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the
center of gravity zone for your vehicle’s cargo load.
Campers can only be installed in a long box pickup.
Check your Truck-Camper Loading Label on the
passenger’s door to determine if your vehicle can carry
a slide-in camper.
You must weigh any accessories, trailer hitches or other
equipment you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract
this extra weight from the CWR. This extra weight may
shorten the center of gravity zone for your vehicle.
Your dealer can help you with this.
4-50
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could
affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck
camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the
front and on the rear wheels separately to determine
axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The
total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given
on the vehicle certification label that is located on the
rear of the passenger’s door. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo
weights, cargo weight rating and the correct center
of gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help
you. Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information,
Truck-Camper Loading.”
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for
your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
the GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-51
later in this section.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may
consider having the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body installed. However, we
recommend that conversions of this type not be done
to pickups. Owners should be aware that, as
manufactured, there are differences between a chassis
cab and a pickup with the box removed which may
affect vehicle safety. For specific information on
this pickup, contact GM Customer Assistance. See
Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
4-51
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, accelleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
4-52
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual
transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s
better not to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering
capacity. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” next.
Maximum Trailer
Weight
GCWR**
5,200 lbs. (2 361 kg)
5,200 lbs. (2 361 kg)
9,500 lbs. (4 309 kg)
9,500 lbs. (4 309 kg)
4WD Crew Cab®
4.3L V6/Auto. Trans.
3.42
3.73
* If your vehicle is equipped with RPO V4A (Xtreme™
Sport Appearance Package), your vehicle was
neither intended nor designed to tow a trailer. For more
information on RPO codes, see Service Parts
Identification Label on page 5-104.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-53
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
4-54
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15
percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 5,200 lbs (2 361 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10
percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
up to a maximum of 5,200 lbs (2 361 kg) with a
weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
above the door latch, or see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure
you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
• If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg) be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
• If your vehicle has the bumper delete option, do not
bolt any type of hitch to the close-out panel. The
close-out panel will not support a hitch.
4-55
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If you’ll be pulling a trailer, that when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your traile will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer tow
vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could be
damaged by sharp turns. Make sure you have ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
4-56
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. For trailers up to 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg) you
may attach the safety chains to the attaching points
on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or
hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brake–and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20
650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch, all parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-57
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-58
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You should use THIRD (3) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a
trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of
your transmission.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or
the manual transmission out of gear and the parking
brake applied) for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If you do get the overheat warning,
see Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-59
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with an
automatic transfer case, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear–not in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-60
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle
lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system. Each
of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a
good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood ....................................................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Brakes ........................................................5-39
Battery ........................................................5-43
Jump Starting ...............................................5-44
Rear Axle .......................................................5-49
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-50
Front Axle ......................................................5-51
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-53
One-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ................5-55
Two-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ................5-56
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-57
Taillamps .....................................................5-58
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-58
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
Tires ..............................................................5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-72
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-75
Buying New Tires .........................................5-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-78
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-78
Tire Chains ..................................................5-80
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-81
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-82
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-94
Appearance Care ............................................5-94
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-95
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-97
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-98
5-2
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-98
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-101
Finish Damage ...........................................5-101
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-101
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-102
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-103
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-103
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-104
Electrical System ..........................................5-104
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-104
Headlamps .................................................5-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-105
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-105
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-105
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-111
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you will
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does,
see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-52 before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-36.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-103.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of your vehicle.
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the fuel filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
5-8
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-98. When filling the tank
do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the
pump shuts off.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-30.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-30.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle on
the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
2. Release the secondary latch located under the front
edge of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
5-10
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
Then, pull the hood down firmly to close. It will latch
when dropped from about 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressing on the hood.
4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put
the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on your engine, you’ll see:
5-12
A. Battery. See Battery on page 5-43 for more
information.
B. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 for more information.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for
more information.
D. Engine Oil Fill. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for
more information.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20 for more
information.
F. Power Steering Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 5-36 for more information.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 5-39 for more information.
H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-105 for more
information.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for more information.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
When to Add Engine Oil
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you will need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-111.
Look for two things:
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-14
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
5-16
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
Remote Oil Filter (Four-Wheel Drive)
The access door for the
remote oil filter is in the
steering linkage shield
assembly located under
the radiator support.
Turn the screw to unlock
or lock the door. Make sure
if you open the door, it is
securely closed when
you are finished.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on the location of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5-18
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles (25 000
km) and replace every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). If
you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To remove either engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on and
remove the cover
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter, if needed.
3. Insert a new air filter. See Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-34 to determine
which filter to use.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Tighten
the fasteners to hold the cover in place.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change the
Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4
.
5-20
How to Check the Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic–especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C)
Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle has this symbol
on it.
The transmission dipstick is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-21
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. To get an accurate reading, when checking the fluid
level, keep the tip of the dipstick down to avoid the
fluid traveling up the dipstick.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON® -III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON® -III is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a
hot check.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-22
described under “How to Check the Automatic
Transmission Fluid” earlier.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine
compartment near the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD, or a
little higher. When your engine is warm, the level
should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.
5-25
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
5-26
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-29.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-29.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-27
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-51.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-28
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you’re parked. Push down the accelerator
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as
normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you’re
parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the ADD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a
leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5-29
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-30
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the
coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
5-31
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-32
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-33
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-34
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this.
5-35
Engine Fan Noise
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
The power steering reservoir is located near the front
of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
5-36
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the proper range.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on locationt. Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
5-38
Brakes
Brake Fluid
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the
fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-30.
5-39
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-32.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-40
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-94.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-41
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-31.
5-42
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
If you do not have four-wheel drive and your brake
pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum
brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up
and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
5-43
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-44 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-75 or
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-75.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-44
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12–volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location of the
battery.
5-45
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You
do not need to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative(-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-46
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the negative (-)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (-) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-47
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
5-48
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regulary check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem,
have it inspected and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
5-49
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additonal systems that
need lubrication.
What to Use
Transfer Case
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-30.
How to Check Lubricant
5-50
To get and accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level service.
Front Axle
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Remove the plug and
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom
of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
5-51
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Bulb Replacement
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58 for the proper
types of bulbs to use. For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact your GM dealer’s
service department.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
5-52
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Headlamps
One-Piece Composite Headlamp
System
1. Open the hood.
5. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove
it from the headlamp assembly.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and
reinstall it in the headlamp assembly by turning
it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
9. Install the two retaining clips.
10. Close the hood.
5-53
Two-Piece Composite Headlamp
System
1. Open the hood.
5. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove
it from the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb assembly and
reinstall it in the headlamp assembly by turning
it clockwise until it is tight.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
4. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into
the vehicle.
9. Install the two retaining clips.
10. Close the hood.
5-54
One-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown in
“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System”
under Headlamps on page 5-53.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise to
remove it from
the headlamp
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straigh out to remove it from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
twist it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
7. Install the two retaining clips.
8. Close the hood.
5-55
Two-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown in
“Two–Piece Composite Headlamp System”
under Headlamps on page 5-53.
2. Locate the locking tabs
on the assembly.
Squeeze the tabs
together and push that
end of the assembly
out while holding
the tabs. The assembly
will swing out.
4. Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it
from the socket.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
6. Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
7. To reinstall the assembly, snap the outboard end of
the lamp assembly back into the vehicle. Then
swing the assembly in and snap it into place.
8. Install the two retaining clips.
9. Close the hood.
5-56
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
3. Remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
1. Remove the lens retaining screws.
2. Remove the lens.
If equipment such as a cap or camper is installed on
your vehicle, a center high-mounted stoplamp feed wire
is provided along the driver’s side rear frame. This
wire should be used to install a center high-mounted
stoplamp in the cap or camper.
5-57
Taillamps
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the screws
from the lamp
assembly near the
tailgate latch.
3. Pull the assembly away from the pickup side panel.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.
Push the tab in while you turn the socket.
5. Pull the bulb out.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket.
7. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise until it locks in place.
8. Reinstall the assembly. Install and tighten
the screws.
9. Close the tailgate.
5-58
Bulb Number
9006 HB4 or
Halogen Headlamps
9006 LL
Composite Low-Beam
9005 HB3
Composite High-Beam
Tail and Stoplamps
3057
Rear Sidemarker Lamps
194
Front Sidemarker Lamps
194NA
Front Turn Signal Lamps
3457A
Center High–Mounted Stoplamp
211–2
*For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” under At Least Twice a Year on
page 6-26.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-34.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
D. Blade Pivot
B. Arm Assembly
E. Hook Slot
C. Locking Tab
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
5-59
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is
fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-60
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
5-61
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
P-Metric Tire
5-62
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-77.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-72 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
5-63
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-42.
LT-Metric Tire
5-64
(D) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a single.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
5-65
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-94 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-81.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-66
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-94 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
5-67
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-68
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “LT” as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75% as high as it is wide.
5-69
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-72.
5-70
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-72 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-75.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-71
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-77.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-42.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
5-72
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-73
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-75 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-78 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-82.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
5-74
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire
that does not match your vehicle’s road tires and
wheels, in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-111.
When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-75
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or Tire and Loading
Information label.
{CAUTION:
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare (if you have one). It was
developed for use on your vehicle.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-77
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-78
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-82 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-79
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
CAUTION:
5-80
(Continued)
(Continued)
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-81
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-82
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment is located behind the rear
seatback on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Bracket
C. Jacking Instructions (Roll and place tag behind the
bracket after the tools are installed.)
D. Bolt Location
E. Wheel Blocks
F. Wing Nut
G. Rubber Band
H. Jack Position
5-83
1. To remove it, turn the plastic wing nut (F)
counterclockwise. Remove the jack cover.
2. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove the
wheel blocks, jack and wheel wrench.
3. Insert the chisel end of
the wheel wrench, on
an angle, into the
hole in the rear
bumper.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist shaft.
5-84
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
5. When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through
the wheel opening.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
tire, it is stowed underneath the rear of your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-94.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional
hub cap removal tool.
5-85
Removing Wheel Covers
Position the bent end of your hub cap removal tool
(shown), or the chisel end of your wheel wrench, in the
notch of the hub cap and pry off the hub cap.
Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them
with the socket end of the wheel wrench.
5-86
If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each
nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel
nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to
remove the wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the
wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you take off
the hub cap.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole (ZR2)
C. Spring Hanger Hole (Standard Pickups)
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise slightly to raise the
jack lift head.
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the
flat tire.
5-87
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-88
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to
fit underneath the wheel well.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.
8. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the
cone-shaped end
is toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by
hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer
as soon as possible.
5-89
{CAUTION:
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
10. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-90
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted
spare.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Wheel Wrench
Hoist Assembly
Retainer
Spring
Tire
F. Valve Stem
(Pointed Down)
G. Lower
H. Raise
5-91
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an
angle, through the hole in the rear bumper and
into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench (A) to tighten
the cable.
5-92
Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the
proper location behind the seat. Secure the items.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Bracket
C. Jacking Instructions (Roll and place instructions
behind the bracket after the tools are installed.)
D. Bolt Location
E. Wheel Blocks
F. Nut
G. Rubber Band
H. Jack Position
Put the jack cover back on, if you have one.
A. Bolt
B. Cover
5-93
Compact Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
5-94
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than others —
and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM- approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
on page 5-102.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose
dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
5-95
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking sold to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-96
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Keep belts clean and dry.
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
5-97
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
5-98
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-102.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-99
Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-100
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Description
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Usage
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
5-102
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-32.
5-103
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as
they should.
paint information and
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-52.
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Headlamps
the model designation,
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-104
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps
to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this
happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located at the end
of the instrument panel
on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are
provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel
cover, push in and turn the fastener clockwise.
Fuse
A
B
1
2
3
5-106
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Cigarette Lighter, Data Link
Connector
Cruise Control Module and Switch,
Body Control Module, Heated Seats
Fuse
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Usage
Gages, Body Control Module,
Instrument Panel Cluster
Parking Lamps, Power Window
Switch, Body Control Module,
Ashtray Lamp
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
Headlamps Switch, Body Control
Module, Headlamp Relay
Courtesy Lamps, Battery Run-Down
Protection
Heating, Ventilation, Air Cooling
Control Head (Manual)
Turn Signal
Cluster, Engine Control Module
Interior Lights
Auxiliary Power
Power Locks Motor
4WD Switch, Engine Controls (VCM,
PCM, Transmission)
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
Fuse
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Usage
Front Wiper
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
Radio, Battery
Amplifier
Heating, Ventilation, Air Cooling
(Manual), Heating,Ventilation, Air
Cooling (Automatic), Heating,
Ventilation, Air Cooling Sensors
(Automatic)
Anti-Lock Brakes
Rear Wiper
Radio, Ignition
5-107
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located under the
hood on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.
5-108
Fuse
TRL TRN
TRR TRN
TRL B/U
VEH B/U
HDLP PWR
RT TURN
Usage
Trailer Left Turn
Trailer Right Turn
Trailer Back Up Lamps
Vehicle Back Up Lamps
Headlamp Power
Right Turn Signal Front
Fuse
LT TURN
HDLP W/W
LT TRN
RT TRN
RR PRK
TRL PRK
LTHDLP
RTHDLP
FRPRK
INT BAT
ENG I
ECM B
ABS
ECM I
F/PUMP
DRL
Usage
Left Turn Signal Front
Not Used
Left Turn Signal Rear
Right Turn Signal Rear
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Trailer Park Lamps
Left Headlamp
Right Headlamp
Front Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Feed
Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,
CAM, PURGE, VENT
Engine Control Module, Fuel Pump
Module, Oil Pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Control Module Injectors
Fuel Pump
Daytime Running Lamps
Fuse
A/C
HORN
W/W PMP
HORN
BTSI
B/U LP
IGN B
STARTER
RAP
LD LEV
OXYSEN
IGN E
MIR/LKS
FOG LP
IGN A
STUD #2
PARKLP
Usage
Air Conditioning
Horn
Not Used
Horn
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Back Up Lamps
Column Feed,Ignition 2, 3, 4
Starter
Retained Accessory Power
Not Used
Oxygen Sensor
Engine
Mirrors, Door Locks
Fog Lamps
Starting and Charging Ignition 1
Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
Parking Lamps
5-109
Fuse
LR PRK
LIFTGLASS
IGN C
HTDSEAT
HVAC
TRCHMSL
RRDFOG
TBC
CRANK
5-110
Usage
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Liftglass
Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,
PRNDL
Heated Seat
Heating,Ventilation, Air Cooling
System
Trailer Center High Mount Stop Light
Rear Defogger
Truck Body Computer
Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
Fuse
CHMSL
HAZLP
VECHMSL
RR DEFOG
HTDMIR
ATC
STOPLP
RR W/W
Usage
Center High Mounted Stoplamp
Hazard Lamps
Vehicle Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirror
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)
Stop Lamps
Rear Window Wiper
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-36 in the index for more information. See refrigerant change
label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Capacity
1.8 lbs
0.79 kg
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
Drain and Refill
Cooling System
13.8 quarts
13.1 L
Differential Fluid
4.0 pints
1.9 L
Rear Axle
2.6 pints
1.2 L
Front Axle
Engine Oil with Filter
4.5 quarts
4.3 L
Fuel Tank
17.5 gallons
67.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. After refill, the level must be checked.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this
manual. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-36
Capacities and Specifications
Type
4300
V6
VIN Code
X
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Firing Order
Automatic
0.060 inches
(1.52 mm)
1-6-5-4-3-2
5-111
✍ NOTES
5-112
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-25
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-25
At Least Once a Month .................................6-25
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-26
At Least Four Times a Year ...........................6-27
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-27
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-30
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-30
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-30
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-30
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-30
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-31
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection .....................6-31
Brake System Inspection ................................6-31
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-32
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-34
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-35
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-36
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part
D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
6-4
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle on page 4-14.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Drive Axle Service.
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Automatic Transmission Service
(severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150 000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down
slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Chassis Lubrication (or 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Automatic Transmission Service
(severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
6-6
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-25
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-30.
Footnotes
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints, constant velocity joint and brake
pedal springs.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-31.
** Drive axle service. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-32 for proper lubricant to use:
• Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or when towing a trailer, drain fluid and
refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See Footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
• If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid
and refill at first engine oil change.
• More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty or off-road use.
6-7
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
6-8
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6-9
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
6-10
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
6-11
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6-12
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-14
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6-15
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-16
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-25
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-30.
6-17
Footnotes
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints, constant velocity joint and brake
pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-31.
** Drive axle service. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-32 for proper lubricant to
use:
❑ Check fluid level and add fluid as needed.
❑ If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid
and refill at first engine oil change.
6-18
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6-19
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
6-20
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and, therefore, have
not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whicheve occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6-21
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
6-22
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
6-23
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking. (See footnote **.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-74 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-24
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for further
details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-61 for further
details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-36 for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.
6-25
At Least Twice a Year
Spare Tire Check
Restraint System Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-82.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-98.
6-26
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-32.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-20. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Four Times a Year
Starter Switch Check
Tailgate Lubrication Service
Lubricate tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot
points, and hinges with lubricant recommended
in Part D.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges, latches
and locks, including the glove box and console
doors, the body hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl and any moving seat hardware.
Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot.
Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-25 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-27
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but do not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs
service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-25 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-28
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-29
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-29.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-30
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals, check
front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when
necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check
and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hose at
transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More
frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use.
6-31
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11® Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
6-32
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube®
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Chassis
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Lubrication
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
Front Wheel
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Bearings
GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. U.S.
1051344, in Canada 993037).
Front and Rear SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM
Axle (Standard Part No. U.S. 1052271, in Canada
Differential)
10950849).
Axle Lubricant; use only GM Part
Rear Axle
No. U.S. 1052271, in Canada
(Locking
10950849. Do not add friction
Differential)
modifier.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
DEXRON
-III Automatic
Transfer Case
Transmission Fluid.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Transfer Case U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Shift Lever
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant (GM Part No.
Rear Driveline Chassis
U.S.
12377985,
in Canada
Center Spline
or lubricant meeting
and Universal 88901242)
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Joints
LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Constant
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Velocity
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Universal Joint requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges, Fuel
Filler Door and
Folding Seats
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch
Bolt and
Linkage
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate® Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube®
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube®
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube® (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
6-33
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Air Cleaner Filter
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Fuel Filter
Oil Filter
PCV Valve
4300 Engine
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
Length
Type
*ACDelco® Part No.
**GM Part No.
6-34
Number
*A1163C
**25098463
**24200796
*GF481
**15050894
*PF47
**25010792
*CV769C
**6487532
*41–932
**25162556
20 inches (51 cm)
Trico
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-35
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-36
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-37
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-38
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ...........................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records ....................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...............................................7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
7-6
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license plate number
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available for
the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate
repair of detected malfunctions; other information
is stored only in a crash or near crash event by
computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern
Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-53
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-38
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-104
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-48
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) .................... 3-40, 3-44, 3-53, 3-64
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-25
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-26
Air Bag System .............................................. 1-47
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 1-53
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-50
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-52
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-50
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-51
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-50
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-48
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
AM ............................................................... 3-76
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-38
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-78
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .... 3-78
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-94
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-97
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-101
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-95
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-98
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-101
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-101
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-102
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-18
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-18
Assist Handles ............................................... 2-40
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-36
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-38
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-76
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-77
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-78
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-51
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-41
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-61
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-37
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-37
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transmission Check ..........................
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
3-75
3-76
3-78
3-13
5-20
2-20
6-26
6-28
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-58
Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-5
Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-17
Bed Rails ...................................................... 2-41
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-32
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-14
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-27
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-25
System Inspection ....................................... 6-31
System Warning Light .................................. 3-28
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-42
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-42
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-41
2
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-57
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps ................................................. 5-53
One-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ............... 5-55
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-58
Taillamps .................................................... 5-58
Two-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ............... 5-56
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-76
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-111
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-10, 2-29, 4-36, 4-51
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-97
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-76
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-78
Your CDs ................................................... 3-77
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-58
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-25
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-58
CD Messages ................................ 3-50, 3-60, 3-75
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-57
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-21
Certification/Tire Label ..................................... 4-46
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-80
Charging System Light .................................... 3-27
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-30
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-35
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-40
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-25
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13
Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level ................................................. 5-21
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-54
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-101
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-33
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-30
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-27
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position .................................................. 1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-41
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-44
Top Strap ................................................... 1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-38
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-36
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-18
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-95
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-98
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ............................ 5-100
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-98
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-95
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-97
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-97
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-96
Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 2-31
Cleaning the Photocells ................................... 2-31
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-97
Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades ....... 5-100
Cleaning Tires .............................................. 5-100
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-96
Cleaning Wood Panels .................................... 5-97
Climate Control System ................................... 3-18
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-94
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-14
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-29
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-20
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
4
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-6
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 2-38
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-26
City ........................................................... 4-30
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-31
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-34
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-27
Winter ........................................................ 4-36
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-22
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-21
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-24
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-24
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-59
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-18
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-37
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-29
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-29
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-19
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-57
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-104
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Headlamps ............................................... 5-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-105
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-105
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs ................................. 3-32
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-43
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30
Coolant ...................................................... 5-23
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-19
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-29
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-30
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-35
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-29
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Starting ...................................................... 2-18
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................... 5-108
Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-25
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16
Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-25
Engine Speed Control ..................................... 2-19
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-15
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-15
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-16
Express Down Window .................................... 2-12
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ............... 3-54
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™) ................................. 3-45, 3-65
Finding a Station .................... 3-38, 3-43, 3-52, 3-62
Finish Care .................................................... 5-99
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-101
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-78
Flash-to-Pass Feature ....................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-81
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-82
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-76
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Following Distance .......................................... 4-57
Footnotes ................................................ 6-7, 6-18
5
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-22, 5-50
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Front Map Lamps ........................................... 3-16
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-40
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-35
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-36
System Inspection ....................................... 6-30
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-105
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-105
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light ..........................
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
6
3-35
3-29
3-35
3-33
3-25
3-25
3-27
Garment Hooks .............................................. 2-40
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-16
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-33
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-7
Headlamps .................................................... 5-53
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Electrical System ....................................... 5-104
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
One-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ............... 5-55
Two-Piece Front Turn Signal Lamps ............... 5-56
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-34
Hitches .......................................................... 4-55
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid .......... 5-22
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-33
How to Check ................................................ 5-73
How to Check Lubricant .......................... 5-49, 5-51
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-37
How to Check the Automatic
Transmission Fluid ....................................... 5-20
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-19
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-29
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard .........................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
Ignition Positions .............................................
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation - Tire Pressure ...................................
5-28
5-27
3-31
3-31
4-38
4-40
4-52
2-16
6-28
1-30
5-72
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-31
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-30
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-30
Fuel System ............................................... 6-30
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-30
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-30
Throttle System ........................................... 6-31
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) ................................... 6-31
Installing a Garage Door Opener ....................... 2-34
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-23
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................... 5-106
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-27
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
7
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-12
Interior ....................................................... 3-15
Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-13
Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-22
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-14
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-41
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ...... 2-27
Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-26
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28
Charging System ......................................... 3-27
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-35
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-36
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-25
Security ..................................................... 3-34
Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ......... 3-34
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-42
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-14
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-8
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
8
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle ..................................... 2-9
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Power Door .................................................. 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-17
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-36
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-40
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-25
At Least Four Times a Year .......................... 6-27
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-25
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-27
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-26
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-31
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-30
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-30
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-30
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-17
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-34
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-25
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-30
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-32
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-36
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-30
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-31
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection .................... 6-31
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-60
Making Turns ................................................. 4-58
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12
Manually Closing the Sunroof ........................... 2-43
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-33
Outside Manual Mirror .................................. 2-31
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-32
Model Reference ................................................ vi
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-34
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-33
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27
One-Piece Composite Headlamp System ............ 5-53
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads .............................................. 4-14
Operation ...................................................... 3-19
9
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-32
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-33
Manual Mirror ............................................. 2-31
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-32
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-33
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-26
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-25
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-29
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-59
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-25
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-30
10
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 6-32
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-36
Passing ................................................. 4-11, 4-58
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-15
Payload ......................................................... 4-48
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .................... 4-51
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-56
Playing a CD ................................. 3-49, 3-58, 3-70
Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-71
Playing the Radio ................... 3-38, 3-42, 3-51, 3-62
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17
Door Locks .................................................. 2-7
Electrical System ....................................... 5-105
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-12
Power Steering ................................................ 4-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-7
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-12
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-26
Radio Data System (RDS) ............... 3-41, 3-54, 3-61
Radio Messages ..................... 3-40, 3-46, 3-56, 3-67
Radios .......................................................... 3-36
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-38
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-76
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-77
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-51
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-41
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-61
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-37
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-37
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-75
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-76
RDS Messages .............................. 3-45, 3-55, 3-66
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Locking ........................................................ 4-8
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-23
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-23
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-31
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-42
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-87
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-82
Removing Wheel Covers .................................. 5-86
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-43
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-54
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-26
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-54
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-54
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-54
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-54
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-17
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-21
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-40
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-35
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-30
11
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-25
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-97
Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-21
Driver Position ............................................ 1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-12
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-23
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-21
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-56
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-17
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-3
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
12
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Seat Position .................................... 1-43
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-41
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-41
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44
Security Light ................................................. 3-34
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30
Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ..................... 3-34
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12
Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
or Check Engine Light in Canada .................. 3-30
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-52
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ....................... 3-66
Setting Preset Stations ............ 3-39, 3-43, 3-52, 3-63
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-37
Radios without Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-37
Setting the Time (cont.)
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Treble) ...................... 3-39, 3-44, 3-53, 3-64
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-101
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-26
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28
Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Skidding ........................................................ 4-13
Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 2-13
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-29
Spare Tire Check ............................................ 6-26
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-96
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-111
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-23
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-27
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-10
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ....................... 6-30
Steering Tips ................................................... 4-9
Storage
Garment Hooks ........................................... 2-40
Storage Areas
Front Storage Area ......................................
Glove Box ..................................................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
Overhead Console .......................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .....................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-40
2-33
2-40
2-33
5-91
4-40
2-13
2-37
2-42
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-25
Tailgate ......................................................... 2-10
Tailgate Lubrication Service .............................. 6-27
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-58
Temperature and Compass Display .................... 2-36
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-15
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-75
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14
Passlock® ................................................... 2-15
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-31
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
13
Time Delay ....................................................
Tire Inflation Check .........................................
Tire Sidewall Labeling ......................................
Tire Size .......................................................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................
Tires .............................................................
Buying New Tires ........................................
Chains .......................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ....................................
Compact Spare Tire .....................................
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................
Wheel Replacement .....................................
When It Is Time for New Tires ......................
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ....................
Top Strap ......................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ...............................
Torque Lock ...................................................
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires ..................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....................................
Towing a Trailer ..........................................
Your Vehicle ...............................................
Trailer
Recommendations .......................................
Trailer Brakes .................................................
14
2-31
6-25
5-62
5-68
5-70
5-61
5-76
5-80
5-82
5-94
5-81
5-72
5-74
5-77
5-78
5-78
5-75
2-19
1-37
1-38
2-28
4-55
4-42
4-51
4-42
4-51
4-57
Transfer Case ........................................ 2-23, 5-50
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection ....................... 6-31
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-20
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-16
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 4-49
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-58
Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System ............ 5-54
Two-Tiered Loading ......................................... 4-48
U
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-29
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-77
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-79
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-95
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-73
Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-41
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-42
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records ...................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-103
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-104
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-44
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-27
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-98
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-26
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-53
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-54
Weight-Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches ............................... 4-56
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
What to Add .................................................. 5-40
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
What to Use .................. 5-24, 5-37, 5-38, 5-50, 5-52
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-78
Replacement ............................................... 5-78
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 5-16
When to Check .............................................. 5-73
When to Check and Change Lubricant ....... 5-49, 5-51
When to Check and Change the Automatic
Transmission Fluid ....................................... 5-20
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-37
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-18
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-60
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-9
15
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-12
Windows ....................................................... 2-11
Manual ...................................................... 2-12
Power ........................................................ 2-12
Sliding Rear ................................................ 2-13
Windshield Washer
Fluid .......................................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-25
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-59
Fuses ...................................................... 5-105
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-36
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-26
16
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-78
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States) ........... 3-41, 3-61, 3-76
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2